JP7297631B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a ready-to-win effect, and during the battle effect, it is possible to further execute a slow motion effect by slowing down the reproduction speed of the battle effect. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the reproduction speed of the battle effect is slowed down as the slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
light emitting means;
a storage means for storing image data;
image processing means capable of executing drawing processing using image data;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and an information effect of operating information display related to the game,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
without changing the operating speed of the information display in the information presentation between the first period and the second period;
The image processing means is
capable of executing a normal drawing process for drawing corresponding to image data and a specific drawing process for drawing by changing at least color information included in the image data,
It is possible to display images in multiple layers with different priorities,
The plurality of layers includes a specific layer and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer,
The image processing means is capable of drawing in the specific layer by the specific drawing process and displaying an effect image ,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect, and a second specific effect with a higher degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific effect,
When the specific drawing process is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific drawing process is not executed,
When the first specific effect is executed, the ratio of executing the specific drawing process is higher than when the second specific effect is executed.
It is characterized by
Another aspect of the gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers that output the sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
moreover,
storage means for storing image data (for example, effect data memory 91AK123, VRAM 91AK147, etc.);
An image processing means (for example, VDP91AK132 etc.) capable of executing drawing processing using image data,
The image processing means is
normal drawing processing for drawing in response to image data (for example, drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display);
specific drawing processing (for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, etc.) for drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, and
Images in a plurality of layers with different priorities (eg layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5) can be displayed, and the plurality of layers are specific layers (eg layers AKL03 to AKL05) and higher priority than the specific layers. special layers (e.g. layers AKL01, AKL02, etc.),
In the specific layer, it is possible to draw by the specific drawing process and display an effect image (see, for example, steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03). It is characterized in that a related predetermined image can be displayed (see step 01AKS04, for example).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following measures 2 to 11. Conventionally, there has been proposed a technology for making it possible to obliquely transform and display an effect image according to an instruction from a display list, as disclosed in JP-A-2018-171129 and JP-A-2012-29947. (For example, Patent Document 1). Also proposed is a technique for a gaming machine that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged.

However, by changing the entire image, there is a risk that the visibility of the important image will be degraded. Therefore, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect of the invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.), and has storage means for storing image data (for example, effect data memory). 91AK123, VRAM 91AK147, etc.) and image processing means (for example, VDP91AK132, etc.) capable of executing drawing processing using image data. drawing processing according to a drawing command for display, etc.) and specific drawing processing (for example, drawing processing according to a drawing command for effect, etc.) for drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data. , images in a plurality of layers with different priorities (eg, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, etc.) can be displayed, and the plurality of layers are specific layers (eg, layers AKL03 to AKL05, etc.) high special layers (for example, layers AKL01, AKL02, etc.), and the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process to display an effect image (for example, see steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03), and the special layer In the layer, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing by the normal drawing process (see step 01AKS04, for example).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific drawing process may be performed by drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(4) Alternatively, in the gaming machine of (3) above, the specific drawing process may convert values of color information included in the image data for drawing (for example, reversal of color information).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above, a first period during which the specific drawing process is not executed (for example, effect execution period D1, etc.) and a second period during which the specific drawing process is executed ( For example, the effect execution period D2, etc.), it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means is not caused to emit light during the second period (for example, effect control example 02AKC01 See).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(6) Alternatively, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2) to (5), a first period (for example, effect execution period D1) during which the specific drawing process is not executed and a second period during which the specific drawing process is executed In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a normal mode, and in the second period, the light emitting means can emit light in the normal mode. You may restrict|limit rather than a form.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (2) to (6) above, set to one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. Possible setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes set value change processing S6A, etc.) is provided, and setting suggestion effects are provided in which suggestions regarding settings of the setting means are performed by displaying in a specific manner (for example, effects according to production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, etc.) may be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(8) Alternatively, in any one of the gaming machines of (2) to (7) above, any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player. setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes set value change processing S6A, etc.) that can be set to the setting suggestion effect (for example, effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) for suggesting the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode etc.), and an image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(9) In any one of (2) to (8) above, it may be possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) of pausing and displaying an image.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above, the specific layer can alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image (for example, effects execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28 see).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (10) above, variable display of the identification information image (for example, decorations in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) variable display of a pattern, etc.) and variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image (for example, variable display of a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1). can be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by the normal drawing process (for example, see FIG. 15-5).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of image display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK.

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. a speaker (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) for outputting sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, it is possible to output by the sound output means at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, first reach effect, second reach effect, first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the effect sound can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the effect moving image is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period in a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part that displays the moving display of the telop at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the predetermined effect than the information effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, during a period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect that sequentially moves and displays information displays suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, moving display of a message according to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T). the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time as they reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production latter half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effect for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, the mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and the mode shown in FIG. 10-28 (D) As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in a manner in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 1-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of displayed concentration lines increases as the battle effect progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of enhancing the effect of the predetermined production is sequentially increased, the execution of the notification production after the end of the second period is performed by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 1-30 (D), FIG. 1-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period makes it easy for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player's action by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is reduced, the visibility of the action promotion effect is not reduced (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continues)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- As shown in 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and then the second section is performed or the predetermined performance is executed without the second section. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ends or whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the interest in the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion in which the reach performance latter half execution period or the third reach performance latter half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A part that displays a moving image when the enemy character falls down due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined effect when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect, the progress speed when shifting to the second zone is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed as in the case A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the effective detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the portion where hits the enemy character is displayed at a speed of V1, while the animation of the portion where the enemy character falls down is displayed at a speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect executing means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is given (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege granting means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the execution of the special effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the award of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the display means displays the first action-promoting image while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, since the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIGS. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the characteristic part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing board 13 for generating sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The voice data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the effect executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (e.g., a message corresponding to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!" during a specific ready-to-win effect) is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display is completed by reaching the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the variable display result is lost, both of the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of decoration patterns and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this manner, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in the feature part 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the mode in which the slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same as described above but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image having the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention is used. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is performed. The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 079SG is based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' that are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

Then, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win production is the third ready-to-win production. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 079SG191, a production control timer setting unit 079SG192, a production control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, when starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, storage storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS115), the processing of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, one buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555" and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production in the present characteristic portion 079SG, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, there is only one chance-up effect start timing. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss Still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effect modes of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, effect sounds, etc. corresponding to the variable display at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the ready-to-win effect develops due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins to control the big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 10-26 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A does not succeed, and the period shifts to the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, sound effect, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27(B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols that are not matched. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and the enemy character A is defeated. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, ally character A and enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, sound effect, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is reached, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

During the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

That is, during the second half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period, the progress speed of the animation of the battle production is lowered to V2, so that the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the execution period of the second ready-to-reach production second half part is over, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H), loss notification In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped due to a combination of missing symbols, and it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without the attack of the friend character A hitting. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal advancing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, effect sounds, etc. corresponding to the variable display at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is performed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling part is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decoration symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with higher priority than "7") displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to the display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is approached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and the enemy character A defeats him, it is notified that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect first half execution period is approached as the battle effect progresses, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation-promoting effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating the display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation-promoting effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), Figure 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. The display of the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T including On the other hand, the telop (message) display itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since the sense of anticipation for the execution of the performance can be heightened, the amusement of the game can be improved. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility is ensured during variable display including the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the execution of the jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music) and sound effects such as sound effects at an appropriate volume from the speakers 8L and 8R, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a cycle shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, an example is given in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotation display of the suspension display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A part of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at a timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect performance of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect performance can be enhanced during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the big hit notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In a state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stop of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-reach effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the presentation in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing expectations for being controlled to the big win game state. You can prevent it from being lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friend character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the super reach variable display, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the advancing speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the display of the fourth ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2 during execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive effect suggesting that the operation promoting effect is executed can be executed before the operation promoting effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C) As shown, in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progressing speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progressing speed of V2. is displayed in 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) ~ Figure 10-32 (G), Figure 10-35 (D) ~ Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figure 10-35 (D) ~ 10-35 (F), the off notification effect of this feature part 079SG A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that it is controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are inverted). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Further, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R are always reproduced at a constant reproduction speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). In this manner, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect is visually recognized by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F can be lowered, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be prevented from being lowered.

As described above, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. After the end of the ready-to-win effect or after the end of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is to be performed, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of a mode in which a message indicating the game state is displayed as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the mode in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promoting effect (the operation promoting image 079SG005Ba or the operation promoting display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, the characteristic portion 079SG exemplifies a mode of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggesting effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked before the moving image of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as a production mode of the resurrection production, for example, a production in which the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character may be used. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game machine. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers that output the sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
moreover,
storage means for storing image data (for example, effect data memory 91AK123, VRAM 91AK147, etc.);
An image processing means (for example, VDP91AK132 etc.) capable of executing drawing processing using image data,
The image processing means is
normal drawing processing for drawing in response to image data (for example, drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display);
specific drawing processing (for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, etc.) for drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, and
Images in a plurality of layers with different priorities (eg layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5) can be displayed, and the plurality of layers are specific layers (eg layers AKL03 to AKL05) and higher priority than the specific layers. special layers (e.g. layers AKL01, AKL02, etc.),
In the specific layer, it is possible to display an effect image by drawing by the specific drawing process (see, for example, steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03). It is characterized in that a related predetermined image can be displayed (see step 01AKS04, for example).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the game interest while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to make the player feel uncomfortable, and the image for effect is drawn in a specific layer by a specific drawing process. , and the predetermined images related to the progress of the game are drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process, so that the visibility of the predetermined images can be secured regardless of the display mode of the production images. Since the display mode of the image for use can be varied, the amusement of the game can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which, when installed in a game arcade, is less likely to cause discomfort in the presentation and easily attracts the interest of the player.

Moreover, when displaying an effect animation, you may make it divide the layer displayed according to a big-hit expectation degree. For example, when displaying a performance animation with a high degree of expectation for a big win, it is preferable to display it in a player-side layer rather than when displaying a performance animation with a low degree of expectation for a big win. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a performance moving image with a high degree of expectation for a big hit from being displayed in duplicate with other effect moving images or advance notices, thereby reducing the visibility.

Also, the performance image may be drawn by normal drawing or special drawing depending on the degree of expectation and type of the big hit. For example, a special drawing method such as 3D display may be used for a performance image or an announcement with a high expectation of a big hit. By doing so, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the visibility of the drawing mode, and interest is improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) has a storage means for storing image data (for example, an effect data memory 91AK123). , VRAM91AK147, etc.), and image processing means (for example, VDP91AK132, etc.) capable of executing drawing processing using image data. drawing processing according to a drawing command for effect, etc.), and a specific drawing processing (for example, drawing processing according to a drawing command for effect, etc.) for drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, Images in a plurality of layers with different priorities (eg layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5) can be displayed, and the plurality of layers are specific layers (eg layers AKL03 to AKL05) and higher priority than the specific layers. a special layer (for example, layers AKL01, AKL02, etc.), the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process to display an effect image (see steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, for example), and the special layer Then, there is a game machine capable of displaying a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing with the normal drawing process (see step 01AKS04, for example). The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

FIGS. 12-1(A) and 12-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 12-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (eg, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 12-2 to 12-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 12-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 12-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 12-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 12-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 12-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win, the easier determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall through a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or is restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform processing corresponding to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) F003 and later of FXXX) may be cleared only.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range to . As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is either a normal state, a time-saving state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit is determined. Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic part 60AK, the number of times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various advance notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when a player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is also collectively referred to as "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. If the variable display content is "Reach (Loss)", if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Loss)", the "Normal" variation pattern will be used to create a reach effect, and the variable display content will be "Super Reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and by being easily controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big hit fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability-high base state, the effect permission condition may be satisfied.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is "losing", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases.

When the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of times of execution in the case of execution are determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The number of times of setting suggestion indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as setting suggestion effects among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be 0 when the jackpot type is "non-probability". When the jackpot type is "probability variable", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times". Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern, and for each execution of the operation presentation. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value reporting is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects that are executed as value notification effects, among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "5 times" or "10 times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 13-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach performance is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-3, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of SP to-win A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 13-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 13-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "five times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 13-4(B) shows an example of determination of setting suggestion times in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variation'' when not controlled to the probability variation state and ``probability variation'' when controlled to the probability variation state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestion production is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the number of suggestions to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the number of suggestions to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion being other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type "unprobability variable" with a low advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as the setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 13-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are determined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 13-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 13-6(A) shows an example of determination in the case of the final operation effect in a plurality of operation effects. Figure 13-6 (B1) and Figure 13-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final one in multiple operation effects, and Figure 13-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern FIG. 13-6 (B2) is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 13-6 (B2) is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It becomes impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the setting value is the highest in the player's advantage, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-6, when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final round, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and determination is impossible. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same mode. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range where it is executed as the setting suggestion effect other than the final episode. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range of being executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it becomes impossible to execute within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same mode. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same mode.

FIG. 13-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 13-7(A) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "execution of 5 times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 5 times. FIG. 13-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of times of value notification is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times of execution of the operation effect and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 5 times", and 0 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined rate. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the set suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-7, it is possible to determine the number of times of value notification other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "executed 5 times" and the case of "executed 10 times". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. expensive. In the case of "executed 10 times", even if the set suggestion number is 0, the rate of the value notification number being determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is larger than that of "execution of 5 times", the rate at which the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notification times that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of operation effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, setting suggesting effects and value notification effects may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 13-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set so as to come later than the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the advance notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be later than the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative symbols (step 60AKS054), and then the process for effects during variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 13-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 13-9(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 13-9(B) shows the execution period and execution timing of the operation-related effects including the number-of-times notification effect and the operation effect. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect process during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the set suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in the specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to further raise the player's expectation after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. , even after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode.

FIGS. 13-10 and 13-11 show examples of execution of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be 10 times, that is, "executed 10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation performance as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 13-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 13-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 13-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 13-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big hit type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of times of execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 13-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 13-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect is executed to notify that it is controlled. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 13-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 13-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image corresponding to the setting suggesting effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 13-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 13-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 13-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 13-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 13-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable big hit combination which is a fixed decoration symbol in response to the end of the variable display. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 13-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probable variation", setting suggestion production may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 13-4, the setting suggestion frequency may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is less advantageous than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variable", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", an operation presentation that is a setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by the value notification effect. When it is performed, the set suggestive performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the value notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small so that the setting suggestion presentation can be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 13-6, for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the operation presentation is the final round, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6 may be difficult to execute. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by. When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 13B, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect as the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to analyze the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand (video motion capture), and an arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various limitations may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. setting means such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing of FIGS. Based on the detection of the player's motion, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. Action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. , the action effect executing means, for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-5, 13-6, and 13-9, the action effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period of time in a suggestive effect mode for suggesting the setting of the setting means. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Equipped with advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 13-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 13-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies that the second advantageous state is controlled. may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot type "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" shown in FIG. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is made, the suggestion is made in a specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-4, it is possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode during a specific period only when the advantageous notification means reports that control is to be performed in an advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the setting suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and restricts execution of the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 13-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-6 in the process of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion, for example, and a second suggestion later than the first timing, for example, in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of, for example, as shown in FIGS. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to draw attention to the action effects of the suggestive effect mode.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that gives an advance notice of being controlled in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 14-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 14-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads out fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 14-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. Any unit can be used as long as the unit is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 14-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the dynamic image display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 14-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 14-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 14-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 14-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the contents of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 14-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 14-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 14-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 14-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 14-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 14-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 14-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. display. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 14-4(B), as shown in FIG. 14-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 14-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 14-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 14-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 14-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 14-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 14-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 14-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 14-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 14-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 14-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 14-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changeable accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIG. 14-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common battle effect display is performed in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is increased, and when the display result of the variable display is "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach A, the degree of expectation for big wins can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table even during the moving image display period with the contents of the common performance display. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 14-7(A) is effect content common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600). ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 14-7 (B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character placement have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 14-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. This text image, compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, when changing and displaying one data, the one data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 14-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at multiple timings.

FIG. 14-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of the text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 14-8(A) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 14-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 14-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 14-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image is displayed in a style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions is changed according to the elapsed time in the arbitrary execution of the effect, not limited to the situation in which the music is played or the voice of the dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part displayed in a display style different from that of other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby improving the player's impression of the display of the text image.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of display control that enables change according to the situation, and display control that enables display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 14-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. Thus, the text image data includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data relating to text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in display effects.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. When displaying a predetermined specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode without being limited to the display color of the text image. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 14-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-8, the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image. may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 14-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 15-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small pattern display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display area 01AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns as reduced identification information is performed, and finalized small patterns as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 15B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command instructing color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting a parameter according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal register of the VDP91AK132 stores control data specifying the operation target included in the display list, numeric data specifying parameters, and other register values. By storing the register value according to the execution command, Drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a combined reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the synthesized reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

In response to command 01AKG02, when executing color blending that inverts color information, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and , and perform difference calculation processing. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", 255-80=175 is obtained, so that the color information can be inverted. The same difference calculation process is performed on the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", so that the color information contained in the image data is converted into an image in which the color information is inverted. can be changed to render the generated image.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. A plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data are used to execute synthesis processing by color blending, such as alpha blending, to perform blur processing. The image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that the image is obtained by changing the color information included in the image data.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data, for example. do. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to monochrome conversion.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. An image that has undergone blurring processing by executing synthesis processing using color blending, such as alpha blending, using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so as to obtain an image with a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 15-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 15-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effects images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Draw possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You can do it like this.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the small value as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the large value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after superimposing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 15-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK 132. FIG. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147. It should be memorized. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 executes, for example, one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. color blend according to the In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 is drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command by some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It suffices to store the images in the screen display frame buffer while synthesizing them according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blend for effect. can.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 and the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and uses the VRAM 91AK 147 for screen display. It can be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers, by a drawing command. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. can be done.

In this way, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . In addition, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. On the other hand, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and stores it in the VRAM 91AK 147. Then, the data is transferred to the frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are changed without color blending for effect. can be drawn for screen display without

FIG. 15-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list containing the drawing commands for effects, the image data to be subjected to effect processing are the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated respectively. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 15-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 for the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 for the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and effect image data 01AKD04 for the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 are obtained. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 15-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 15-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 15-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 15-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. memorize with The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn by the drawing command included in the display list, for example. , and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is specified next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read and superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 in which the color information is changed by color blending for effect, and the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 after the conversion are given priority for display. The data are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order according to the frequency. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and display various images for effects such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for increasing chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by normal drawing processing without color blending for effects, and effects images showing pending display and active display, effect images showing small symbols, etc., are displayed according to the progress of the game. A related predetermined image can be displayed.

FIG. 15-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. .

FIG. 15-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among color blends for effect is displayed in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, are drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing processing. A production image can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 15-6(B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list containing command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by difference calculation processing for converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing, and an effect image is drawn. can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is processed by combining color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information contained in the . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring due to rotation as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image regarding the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to create an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. As a result, even an effect image drawn using common image data can be drawn with its color information or position information changed by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and execute various display effects to improve amusement in the game.

FIG. 15-7(A) shows a setting example of the reliability of the big hit according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of cases where the variable display result is "big win" and controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big hit is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set differently according to multiple types of ready-to-win effects. It is good if there is

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach with a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. is. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the presentation mode in which the difference can be recognized is arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary display using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. light emission, any action using the movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, the image drawn in response to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to display the image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect. good. When the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if it includes the case where the display of the image drawn in response to the drawing command for normal display is executed without executing the specific drawing effect good.

FIG. 15-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The content of the drawing effect includes presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect draws and displays an effect image that has undergone monochrome conversion using command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. In the color information inversion effect, command 02 among the effect drawing commands is used to draw and display an effect image in which color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

A strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single-color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 15-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawing It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When the variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result and the ready-to-win effect content, A drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Fig. 15-8, if the variable display result is "losing", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (= 60/100) Effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and 5% (=5 /100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5% = (5/100). be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the content of reach effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100). Drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios in which the variable display result is "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. Then, when the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big win", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". The ratio of determination to the drawing effect pattern other than . Therefore, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display, is executed, it is more likely than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state increases. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 are set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high hit reliability, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3, it can be determined to any one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. . When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability of big win than in the case of SP ready-to-win B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, execution of the specific drawing performance increases the ratio of control to the big win game state, so super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win. Even with the ready-to-win effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect increases the expectation of the player and appropriately enhances the interest in the game.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is the SP ready-to-win effect B, it is possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the content of the ready-to-reach effect is the SP reachable effects A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach-B, the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. may be set as a limit.

FIG. 15-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 15-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is performed. become viable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the output of BGM and sound effects good. In addition, during the effect execution period D0, when the decorative design is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, or when the "left", "middle" and "right" ', the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop displaying the decorative patterns that constitute the pseudo consecutive chances, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are turned on in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to execute a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. It may be possible to perform a production.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. becomes viable. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. may be When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is performed in the normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying fixed decoration patterns, etc., which are the result of variable display. It suffices to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Also, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning before the variable display for executing the ready-to-win performance of super-to-win. You may do so. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 Images drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emission performance using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is viable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period during which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in which the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is enabled. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying is executed, there is a limitation as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve amusement in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emitting effect by light emission of the light emitting member, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. A limitation may be provided to the effect mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the effect amount of the light emitting effect more than in the case of using the light emitting effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect amount is reduced by reducing the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. A limit may be set as follows.

FIGS. 15-10 to 15-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 15-10 shows an effect execution example in the case where the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 15-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 15-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 15-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 15-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative patterns corresponding to the number "7" are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) to establish a ready-to-win state. , reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient if it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 15-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 15-10(C) and 15-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the effect execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 15-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 15-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 15-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win effect with different effect contents depending on the result of the variable display is executed. Then, the fixed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 15-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish is completed, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 15-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 15-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 15-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of pause display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 15-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 15-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 15-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 15-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 15-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, temporary stop display can be performed along with strobe display. . After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to and the light emission effect is executed.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed in accordance with the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR does not affect the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and to execute various display effects to improve amusement in the game.

FIG. 15-12(A) corresponds to the start of the effect execution period D2, and when the chance-up effect during reach is executed, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows an effect execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 15-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 15-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during execution of the chance-up effect during reaching, following the effect execution example 02AKM22. is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific rendering effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, as in the effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 15-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 15-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 15-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 15-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information conversion effect. FIG. 15-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion, which is drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying with , it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the stroboscopic display.

Effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be varied, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the display effect can be achieved while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 15-13(A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by the color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. It shows an effect execution example 02AKM31. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 15-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 serving as specific layers draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 15-13(C) is an effect execution example in which, following effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the effect execution example 02AKM05. , the pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 15-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 15-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2 following the effect execution example 02AKM34. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 15-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 15-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. It should be noted that pause display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by color information conversion effect. FIG. 15-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image is alternately and repeatedly switched between an image obtained by inverting color information drawn by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying it, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, uses an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data in accordance with the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132, and uses dedicated image data. It can be executed regardless of As a result, even for an effect image drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR and the normal drawing effect NOR. can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining effect display, which is a color information reversal effect, and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the change in color of the displayed image, and the image data can be displayed while preventing an increase in the amount of image data. It is possible to enhance the impression of the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win production is any of SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3, a super-ready-to-win ready-to-win production of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability level than the case of SP reach B is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of incongruity in the display effect not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved appropriately.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It may be one provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that is a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and is controlled to a big win game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content of the drawing effect pattern and the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio is high.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Also, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided near the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Then, a light-emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determined result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display are drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient if the effect image corresponding to the suspended display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling the monochrome display of such a suspended display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display, such as a suspended display and an active display, a specific drawing effect SPE , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. At the timing when the pending display is displayed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the success pattern changing effect is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the color changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect for left-handed or right-handed effects, a performance image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion effect is executed is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. In the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. If it is Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, the second promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, since the direction display layer is included in the special layer, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image that prompts the shooting of the game medium can be drawn and displayed by normal rendering processing instead of the specific rendering processing, so that the visibility of the image that prompts the shooting of the game media is appropriately ensured, and various display effects are executed. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a grand prize entrance door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. The warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality can be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing instead of a specific drawing process. You can run it to improve your gaming interest. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that images suggesting set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to enhance amusement in a game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer can be displayed in the special layer. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in a specific layer by a specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the set value with different advantages for the player. , can improve the game interest.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, it is possible to control an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which navigation notification for notifying a stop order that is advantageous to a player according to an internal lottery result can be executed. As the navigation notification, an effect image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device to notify the stopping order in an identifiable manner. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order to stop the variable display by the left, middle and right reels, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Visibility of the image notifying the operation mode by drawing and displaying the image notifying the operation mode when stopping the variable display in the slot machine in the special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. can be appropriately ensured, various display performances can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, for example, the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, for example, drawing corresponding to image data, Specific drawing processing such as drawing processing corresponding to drawing commands for effects, for example, drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, can be executed. An image in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers includes specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having a higher priority than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer is drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for effect. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, a plurality of periods including a first period in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Of these, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not emit light during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period in which the specific drawing process is not executed, such as the effect execution period D1, and a second period in which the specific drawing process is executed, such as the effect execution period D2, light is emitted during the first period. It is possible to cause the means to emit light in a normal manner, and in the second period the light emission of the light emitting means may be more restricted than in the normal manner. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion effect such as an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect by pausing and displaying an image, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in rendering execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. Equipped with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and specific effects such as super ready-to-win effects suggesting control to an advantageous state for the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. At least in the first period, such as the effect execution period D1, among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to the drawing command of , and among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, the second period, such as the effect execution period D2, after the first period, for example In the second period, an image drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display an image drawn by As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the game interest.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by means of the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, the lighting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, You may restrict|limit light emission production|presentation rather than a normal aspect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion effect such as an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component, or add a character image using data related to a common character image to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image In the specific layer, the specific drawing process is used to draw the effect image, and the special layer, which has a higher priority than the specific layer, is drawn by the normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in the second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the case of the second pattern in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state is different from that of the first pattern.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
light emitting means;
a storage means for storing image data;
image processing means capable of executing drawing processing using image data;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and an information effect of operating information display related to the game,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
without changing the operating speed of the information display in the information presentation between the first period and the second period;
The image processing means is
capable of executing a normal drawing process for drawing corresponding to image data and a specific drawing process for drawing by changing at least color information included in the image data,
It is possible to display images in multiple layers with different priorities,
The plurality of layers includes a specific layer and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer,
The image processing means is capable of drawing in the specific layer by the specific drawing process and displaying an effect image ,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect, and a second specific effect with a higher degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific effect,
When the specific drawing process is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific drawing process is not executed,
When the first specific effect is executed, the ratio of executing the specific drawing process is higher than when the second specific effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images